Casio WK-240 WK-245 CTK-4400 Manual

‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CTK-4400‬‬ ‫‪WK-240‬‬ ‫‪WK-245‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫»ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ«‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1402-A Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪WK240/CTK4400-AR1A‬‬ ‫‪10:23:17‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺗ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-1‬‬ ‫‪10:23:17‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-4 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪AR-31 ..................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪AR-7.......................... () FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪AR-31 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ ‪AR-9 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪AR-32 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪AR-7................................... (‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ‪AR-8.........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪AR-9............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪AR-9..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪AR-10 .........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪AR-10 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪AR-11 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪AR-31 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪AR-33 .................................................3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪AR-34 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪AR-36 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪AR-37 .....‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪AR-38 .................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ WK-240‬ﻭ‪AR-11 ...........................(WK-245‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪AR-38 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ‪AR-12 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪AR-41 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪AR-12 ......‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪AR-13 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺰﺍﺀ ‪AR-39 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪AR-42 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪AR-43 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪AR-14 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ )ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ( ‪AR-44 .................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ‪AR-15 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪AR-45 ............‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪AR-14 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ‪AR-15 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AR-16 ................................... VIRTUAL HALL‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ‪AR-16 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪AR-17 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪AR-17 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ‪AR-18 .......‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪AR-19 .................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪AR-19 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ( ‪AR-20 .......‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ(‪AR-22 ........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪AR-48 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪AR-49 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪AR-49 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪AR-50 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪AR-50 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ‪AR-51 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪AR-53 ..............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪AR-53 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪AR-54 .......................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ‪AR-25 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪AR-27 ...............‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪AR-27 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪AR-28 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ‪AR-30 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪AR-2‬‬ ‫‪10:23:17‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪AR-55 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪AR-55 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪AR-56 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪AR-57 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-58 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪AR-58 ............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪AR-59 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-59 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪AR-60 ..................................................... MIDI‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪AR-62 ................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪AR-63 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ‪AR-64 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪AR-64 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪AR-66 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪AR-67 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪AR-68 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪AR-69 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ‪AR-70 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-71 ....................................................‬‬ ‫‪MIDI Implementation Chart‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫● ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺮ￯ )ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬ ‫‪AR-3‬‬ ‫‪10:23:18‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ »ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ« ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.CTK-4400/WK-240/WK-245‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.WK-240‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺰﻋﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪345‬‬ ‫‪bm‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪6 7 8 9 bk bl‬‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bq bp bo bn‬‬ ‫‪cs ct‬‬ ‫‪bt ck cl cm cn co cp cq cr‬‬ ‫‪bs‬‬ ‫‪dm dn do‬‬ ‫‪dl‬‬ ‫‪dk‬‬ ‫‪dp‬‬ ‫‪dr‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪dk‬‬ ‫‪dq‬‬ ‫‪AR-4‬‬ ‫‪10:23:18‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﺎﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ $‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :$‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪(POWER) P‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-10‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(VOLUME‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-10‬‬ ‫)‪(VIRTUAL HALL, DEMO $‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-16‬ﻭ ‪27‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )‪(RHYTHM EDITOR‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ )‪(INTRO, REPEAT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-29‬ﻭ ‪41‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ )‪(VAR./FILL-IN, FF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-28‬ﻭ ‪41‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫)‪(START/STOP, PLAY/STOP‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫)‪(CHORDS $, ACCOMP, PART SELECT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-30‬ﻭ ‪39‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-45‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ )‪(METRONOME, BEAT $‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-13‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ )‪(NORMAL/FILL-IN, REW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-28‬ﻭ ‪41‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫)‪(SYNCHRO/ENDING, PAUSE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-28‬ﻭ ‪41‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻔﺎﻉ )‪(TEMPO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-27‬ﻭ ‪38‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-13‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-14‬‬ ‫)‪(RHYTHM, ONE TOUCH PRESET $‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-38‬ﻭ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )‪(SONG BANK‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-28‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [−]/[+‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ )‪ (BANK, LISTEN‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-33‬ﻭ ‪48‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪(MUSIC PRESET‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-56‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ )‪(Area2, REMEMBER‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-34‬ﻭ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪(Area3, NEXT‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(Area4, AUTO‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-32‬ﻭ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-36‬ﻭ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫)‪(STORE, MUSIC CHALLENGE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-37‬ﻭ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ )‪(SPLIT‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-15‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ )‪ (LAYER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-15‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )‪(TONE‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪(Area1, WATCH‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-33‬ﻭ ‪48‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR, TYPE $‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-43‬ﻭ ‪57‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)‪(PIANO/ORGAN, CHORD BOOK $‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-14‬ﻭ ‪44‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )‪(RECORDER, SAMPLING $‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-50‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪(FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-39‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-14‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪AR-5‬‬ ‫‪10:23:18‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫■ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ )‪(MIC VOLUME‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ WK-240‬ﻭ‪ (WK-245‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-19‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-59‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫)‪(SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-17‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-19‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ )‪(PHONES/OUTPUT‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪DC 9.5V‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-9‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-11‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )‪(MIC IN/SAMPLING‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ WK-240‬ﻭ‪ (WK-245‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-19‬‬ ‫‪AR-6‬‬ ‫‪10:23:19‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) FUNCTION‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ( ) FUNCTION‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫( ﻭ)‬ ‫( ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،13‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪[6‬‬ ‫]‪ (ENTER) [9‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(EXIT) [7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪S t . G r Pn o‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،001‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪.1 0 0‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]–[ )ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [+‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]–[ ﻭ]‪[+‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]–[ )ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [+‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-7‬‬ ‫‪10:23:19‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪MIDI‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪Trans.‬‬ ‫‪AR-18‬‬ ‫‪AcompVol‬‬ ‫‪AR-42‬‬ ‫‪Song Vol‬‬ ‫‪AR-30‬‬ ‫‪Touch‬‬ ‫‪AR-12‬‬ ‫‪Tune‬‬ ‫‪AR-18‬‬ ‫‪Reverb‬‬ ‫‪AR-16‬‬ ‫‪Chorus‬‬ ‫‪AR-17‬‬ ‫‪SAMPLING‬‬ ‫‪AutoStrt‬‬ ‫‪AR-25‬‬ ‫‪AutoStop‬‬ ‫‪AR-25‬‬ ‫)‪(Protect‬‬ ‫‪AR-26‬‬ ‫‪LESSON‬‬ ‫‪Speak‬‬ ‫‪AR-34‬‬ ‫‪NoteGuid‬‬ ‫‪AR-35‬‬ ‫‪Scoring‬‬ ‫‪AR-35‬‬ ‫‪PhraseLn‬‬ ‫‪AR-35‬‬ ‫‪SCALE‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (SONG BANK‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫]‪-10 [1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ (SONG BANK) ‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪-10 [1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Pls wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪-10 [1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪.(‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-10‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-55‬‬ ‫‪OTHER‬‬ ‫‪ArpegHld‬‬ ‫‪AR-57‬‬ ‫‪Jack‬‬ ‫‪AR-17‬‬ ‫‪AcompScl‬‬ ‫‪AR-56‬‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫‪AR-12‬‬ ‫‪MIDI‬‬ ‫‪Keybd Ch‬‬ ‫‪AR-60‬‬ ‫‪Navi. Ch‬‬ ‫‪AR-60‬‬ ‫‪Local‬‬ ‫‪AR-61‬‬ ‫‪AcompOut‬‬ ‫‪AR-61‬‬ ‫‪DELETE‬‬ ‫)ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬ ‫‪AR-26‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪AR-58‬‬ ‫‪All Data‬‬ ‫‪AR-58‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪AR-47‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫‪AR-8‬‬ ‫‪10:23:19‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎﹰ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺴﺮﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪<CTK-4400‬‬ ‫>‪<WK-240/WK-245‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻷﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻻﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺷﺘﺮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-3‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ :CTK-4400‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪AA-‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ :WK-240/WK-245‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪D-‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪) AD-E95100L :‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪(JEITA‬‬ ‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬ ‫‪DC 9.5V‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪.AC‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺳﺎﺧﻨ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﺧﺬﺭﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻧﺜﻨﺎﺀ!‬ ‫■ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ!‬ ‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ DC‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪AR-9‬‬ ‫‪10:23:20‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪ct‬‬ ‫‪bm‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺣﺪ￯ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6 :‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ 30 : AC‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(P‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫■ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪ ،(TONE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Pls wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺎﺻﻔﺔ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-10‬‬ ‫‪10:23:20‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪WK-240‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪(WK-245‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬ ‫)‪ .(MIC VOLUME‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-14‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ )‪(PHONES/OUTPUT‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻻﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-3‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻚ ﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )‪(MIC IN/SAMPLING‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﻛ ﹰ‬ ‫)‪(MIC VOLUME‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻀﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪AR-11‬‬ ‫‪10:23:20‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫)ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “OTHER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪OTHER‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺻﺎﺧﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺊ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫”‪.“Contrast‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪Co n t r a s t‬‬ ‫ﻻﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.17‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “Touch‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪To u c h‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(oFF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(1) 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(2) 2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪AR-12‬‬ ‫‪10:23:21‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) y‬ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺎ( ﻭ‪) t‬ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ t‬ﻭ‪ y‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻀﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ‪ 89‬ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻛﺎ ‪.089‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﻷﻭﻝ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-42‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-30‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Be a t‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ( ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-13‬‬ ‫‪10:23:21‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪cocp‬‬ ‫‪co‬‬ ‫‪cp cr ct‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻛﺴﺘﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪.(TONE‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪S t . G r Pn o‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ 001‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪.1 0 0‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ« ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪ (001‬ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪.(079‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪VIRTUAL HALL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻮﻱ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪“06” :‬‬ ‫‪00 :‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪SUS :‬‬ ‫‪) “161” :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ(‬ ‫”‪) “094‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪0:‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪Equal :‬‬ ‫‪AR-14‬‬ ‫‪10:23:22‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻭﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪032 ELEC.PIANO 1 :‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻟﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-14‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (TONE) ‬ﻭﺛﻢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪303 FLUTE 1 :‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪E . P i a n o 1‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪F l u t e‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪205 STRINGS :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪064 VIBRAPHONE 1 :‬‬ ‫‪S t r i n‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)ﻳﺤﻴﺚ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(١‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ( ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪V i b e s‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FLUTE 1‬‬ ‫‪VIBRAPHONE 1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪AR-15‬‬ ‫‪10:23:22‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﺠﺰﺉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(١‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ )ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ( ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺻﺪ￯ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “Reverb‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Re v e r b‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﺳﻂ ‪ (C4) C‬ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﺉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(oFF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪VIRTUAL HALL‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﻣﺸﺘﻤ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ VIRTUAL HALL‬ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪VIRTUAL‬‬ ‫‪ HALL‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻘﺔ ‪ VIRTUAL HALL‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪ (VIRTUAL HALL‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪VIRTUAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ HALL‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ VIRTUAL HALL‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ VIRTUAL HALL‬ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪VIRTUAL‬‬ ‫‪ HALL‬ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪VIRTUAL HALL‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ VIRTUAL HALL‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-16‬‬ ‫‪10:23:22‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻭﺃﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺗﻚ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻵﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “OTHER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “Chorus‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪OTHER‬‬ ‫‪Ch o r u s‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫”‪.“Jack‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪J a c k‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﺘﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺟﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-3‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪Sustain‬‬ ‫)‪(SUS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺭﻏﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮ‬ ‫‪Sostenuto‬‬ ‫)‪(SoS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ‪Soft‬‬ ‫)‪(SFt‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻌﻢ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪ Rhythm‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(rHy‬‬ ‫‪SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK‬‬ ‫‪AR-17‬‬ ‫‪10:23:23‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +12‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +2‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-15‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻻﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪T r a n s .‬‬ ‫‪e r‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﺮﻭﺍ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪ .A4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 415.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 465.9‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ 440.0‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (FUNCTION) ‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫]‪) [4‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪.“Tune‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫‪Tu n e‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ”‪ “Tune‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 0.1‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪p p‬‬ ‫‪Oc t U‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻤﺪ￯‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺉ ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪Oc t L owe r‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 4 0 . 0Hz‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-18‬‬ ‫‪10:23:23‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bobn‬‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪cr cs ct‬‬ ‫‪bsbt‬‬ ‫‪bs‬‬ ‫‪btck‬‬ ‫‪ckcl‬‬ ‫‪clcm‬‬ ‫‪cmcn‬‬ ‫‪cn‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﺒﺎﺡ ﻛﻠﺒﻚ ﻭﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ .CD‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ WK-240‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (WK-245‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ .(CTK-4400‬ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪<CTK-4400‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺪ￯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪.(MIC VOLUME‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪،CD‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ (AUDIO IN‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫>‪<WK-240/WK-245‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪.AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )‪(MIC IN/SAMPLING‬‬ ‫‪AR-19‬‬ ‫‪10:23:24‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫)ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪:CTK-4400‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪:WK-245 ،WK-240‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻷﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 601‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(605‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﹰﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 601‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (605‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪l i n‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪Sam‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪Da t a‬‬ ‫‪No‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺄﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪n l‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪Wa i t i n‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪S1 : O r‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ« ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-26‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹸﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ »ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ« ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-26‬‬ ‫‪AR-20‬‬ ‫‪10:23:24‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ‪ (C4) C‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪ C4‬ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ )ﻣﻦ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.(‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺘﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫( ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﺮﺭﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪n t hPo‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪601‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪602‬‬ ‫‪603‬‬ ‫‪604‬‬ ‫‪605‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-21‬‬ ‫‪10:23:25‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 601‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 605‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻠﻲ )‪(Orgnl‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ‪(Loop1) 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ‪(Loop2) 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ‪(Loop3) 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪،607 ،606‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ .608‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )‪ ،607 ،606‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (608‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Da t a‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ‪ (Ptch1) 1‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ‪ (Ptch2) 2‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪No‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ‪(Ptch3) 3‬‬ ‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )‪(Treml‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺘﻊ ‪(Funy1) 1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺘﻊ ‪(Funy3) 3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺘﻊ ‪(Funy2) 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪Da t a‬‬ ‫‪No‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪AR-22‬‬ ‫‪10:23:25‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ* ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪Wa i t i n‬‬ ‫‪l D r m1‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sm‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺄﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫* ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪.(WK-245 ،WK-240‬‬ ‫‪C7‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪C2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪:CTK-4400‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪:WK-245 ،WK-240‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪l i n‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻃﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ« ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-26‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹸﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ »ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ« ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.AR-26‬‬ ‫‪Sam‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪AR-23‬‬ ‫‪10:23:26‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )‪ ،607 ،606‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (608‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ SAMPLING‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 63‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪ .(RHYTHM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “DelSure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( )‪ [+] (YES‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ )‪ [–] (NO‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪D4‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ(‬ ‫‪l D r m1‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sm‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (RHYTHM) ‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫)‪(FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ )ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪.(TONE‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻷﺧﺮ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ C4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪D4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-24‬‬ ‫‪10:23:26‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﺲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺒﺪﺋﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “SAMPLING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﺲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻌﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “SAMPLING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪SAMP L I NG‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪Au t oS t r t‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪Au t oS t o‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺣﺪ￯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-20‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-22‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪:(AR-20‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪:(AR-22‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-25‬‬ ‫‪10:23:27‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “DELETE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (TONE) ‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪DELETE‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪S1 : O r‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “SAMPLING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫”‪.“Protect‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪P r o t e c t‬‬ ‫‪n l‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻲ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪n l‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪* 1 : O r‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫? ‪Su r e‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫■ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-62‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ (YES) [+‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ]–[‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫)‪ (NO‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ (EXIT) [7‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ« ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-24‬‬ ‫‪AR-26‬‬ ‫‪10:23:27‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪bp‬‬ ‫‪6 7 8 9 bk bl bm‬‬ ‫‪ct‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻜﻮﻧﻬﺎ »ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ«‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻋﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-31‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-59‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-69‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﺰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-10‬ﻗﺎﺑ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻧﻘﻀﺖ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺳﺖ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-10‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪E i n eK l n e‬‬ ‫‪AR-27‬‬ ‫‪10:23:28‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-69‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،001‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪.1 0 0‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪Tw i n k l e‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-32‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-32‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-28‬‬ ‫‪10:23:28‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻘﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﺄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) y‬ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺎ( ﻭ‪) t‬ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ y‬ﻭ‪ t‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪AR-29‬‬ ‫‪10:23:29‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “Song Vol‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Vo l‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪So n‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬ ‫)ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪(SONG BANK‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-62‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-58‬‬ ‫‪AR-30‬‬ ‫‪10:23:29‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bp‬‬ ‫‪bsbt‬‬ ‫‪bs‬‬ ‫‪btck‬‬ ‫‪ckcl‬‬ ‫‪clcm‬‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫‪ct‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻄﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ )ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪....‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪bk bl‬‬ ‫‪678‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻼ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪1‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ‪3 ،2 ،1‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ‪3 ،2 ،1‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺱ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ‪3 ،2 ،1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ ،4 ،3 ،2‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺗﻚ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ!‬ ‫‪AR-31‬‬ ‫‪10:23:30‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫>‪<Phrase‬‬ ‫>‪<Wait‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”>‪ “<Wait‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ”>‪.“<Phrase‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣ ﹰﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻗﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻮﺱ ﻳﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪NextPhrs‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿ ﹰﺎ ”>‪) “<Wait‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-36‬‬ ‫‪Listen‬‬ ‫‪Watch‬‬ ‫‪Remember‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،2 ،1 Auto Step Up‬ﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-36‬‬ ‫‪From top‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-36‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Complete‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-36‬‬ ‫> ‪<Ph r a s e‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﴍ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (SONG BANK‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-30‬‬ ‫‪AR-32‬‬ ‫‪10:23:30‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻧﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ :1‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻠﻦ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺍﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ :2‬ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻠﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺘﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫>ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪<2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺷﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﻤﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫!‪Bravo‬‬ ‫!‪Again‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺠﺤﺖ! ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-33‬‬ ‫‪10:23:31‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ :3‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،2‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪ ،3‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﺩﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫>ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪<3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺰﻗﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “LESSON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪L ESSON‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪e a k‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬ ‫‪AR-34‬‬ ‫‪10:23:31‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “LESSON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪No t eGu i d‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻚ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “LESSON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫”‪.“PhraseLn‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(oFF‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )‪ (PrE‬ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮ )‪(Ln1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪(Ln2‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫”‪.“Scoring‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Ph r a s e L n‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “LESSON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫”‪.“NoteGuid‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪(Ln3‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sc o r i n g‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬ ‫‪AR-35‬‬ ‫‪10:23:32‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.1‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،1‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،3‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ”!‪.“Bravo‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪ ، ،‬ﻭ‪‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-34‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-35‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪*3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪3‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪*3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪*3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬ ‫* ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫”!‪ “Bravo‬ﺍﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-36‬‬ ‫‪10:23:32‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪bpbo‬‬ ‫‪bobn‬‬ ‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫‪cn‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 20‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)‪،(TONE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬ ‫)‪ ،(RHYTHM‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫‪T i me 1 9 . 2‬‬ ‫! ‪M . CHA L .‬‬ ‫‪Sc o r e 1 0 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺄ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻤﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻣﺴﺤﺖ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﻦ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ 0.1 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 0.3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪،‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪  ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫! ‪M . CHA L .‬‬ ‫‪AR-37‬‬ ‫‪10:23:33‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bqbpbobn‬‬ ‫‪cq cs ct‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻣﺘﻼﻛﻚ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺇﻳﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺬﻫﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6 7 8 9 bk bl bm‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ‪-8‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻟﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪n t hPo‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ« ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،001‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪.1 0 0‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-38‬‬ ‫‪10:23:33‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻣﺘﻼﻛﻚ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻃﻠﺒﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫»ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ« ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-42‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-16‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪FINGERED 1‬‬ ‫• ‪FINGERED 2‬‬ ‫• ‪FINGERED 3‬‬ ‫• ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬ ‫• ‪FULL RANGE CHORD‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪Ch o r d‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ WK-240‬ﻭ‪.WK-245‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D-F#-A-C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪ D-F#-A-C‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )‪.(D7‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-39‬‬ ‫‪10:23:34‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ‪3 ،2 ،FINGERED 1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-70‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﻻﺗﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪FINGERED 1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪FINGERED 2‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ،“FINGERED 1” 1‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ m7‬ﺃﻭ ‪.m75‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪FINGERED 3‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ،“FINGERED 1” 1‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ C) C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬ ‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬ ‫‪ C) Cm‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬ ‫‪ C) C7‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬ ‫‪ C) Cm7‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ ،CASIO CHORD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫■ ‪FULL RANGE CHORD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-70‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪AR-40‬‬ ‫‪10:23:35‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ »ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ« ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ »ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺧﺘﻼﻑ«‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺣﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ”‪ “fill-in‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻛﻴﺪ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺸﻮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺸﻮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫■ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫■ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪AR-41‬‬ ‫‪10:23:35‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “AcompVol‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Vo l‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) y‬ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺎ( ﻭ‪) t‬ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ y‬ﻭ‪ t‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻼﺋﻤﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A c om‬‬ ‫)‪ (RHYTHM‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪AR-42‬‬ ‫‪10:23:36‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻏﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 12‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-57‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻫﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪001‬‬ ‫‪Duet 1‬‬ ‫‪002‬‬ ‫‪Duet 2‬‬ ‫‪003‬‬ ‫‪Country‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ )ﻣﻔﺼﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ 1-‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ )ﻣﻔﺼﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ 1-‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪) (ACCOMP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-39‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪FULL RANGE‬‬ ‫‪ CHORD‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺧﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪007‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪008‬‬ ‫‪Strings‬‬ ‫‪009‬‬ ‫‪4-Way Open‬‬ ‫‪010‬‬ ‫‪4-Way Close‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ‪-3‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪011‬‬ ‫‪Block‬‬ ‫‪012‬‬ ‫‪Big Band‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪004‬‬ ‫‪Octave‬‬ ‫‪005‬‬ ‫‪5th‬‬ ‫‪006‬‬ ‫‪3-Way Open‬‬ ‫‪3-Way Close‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪Du e t‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ‪ 013‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 102‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-57‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Du e t‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ‪-3‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻏﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪S t . G r Pn o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪AR-43‬‬ ‫‪10:23:37‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ )ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ(‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “ChordBk‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) M‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬ ‫‪Ch o r dBk‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫) ‪M (Ma j o r‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‪) m ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪،m7 ،7th ،sus2 ،sus4 ،aug ،dim ،‬‬ ‫‪،69 ،dim7 ،mM7 ،madd9 ،add9 ،7sus4 ،75 ،m75 ،M7‬‬ ‫‪m6 ،6th‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪Ch o r dBk‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻣﻦ ]‪[0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‬ ‫)‪،(TONE‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ،(SONG BANK‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)‪،(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-44‬‬ ‫‪10:23:37‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫‪6 7 8 9 bk bl‬‬ ‫‪ct‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻖ »ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ« ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 181‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.190‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫■ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺍﻷﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‪ 6 :‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‪ 8 :‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪INTRO‬‬ ‫‪NORMAL‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪NORMAL‬‬ ‫‪FILL-IN‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪4‬‬ ‫‪VARIATION‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪VARIATION‬‬ ‫‪FILL-IN‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪NF‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪VF‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪I-1‬‬ ‫‪N-1‬‬ ‫‪NF-1‬‬ ‫‪V-1‬‬ ‫‪VF-1‬‬ ‫‪E-1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪I-2‬‬ ‫‪N-2‬‬ ‫‪NF-2‬‬ ‫‪V-2‬‬ ‫‪VF-2‬‬ ‫‪E-2‬‬ ‫‪I-3‬‬ ‫‪N-3‬‬ ‫‪NF-3‬‬ ‫‪V-3‬‬ ‫‪VF-3‬‬ ‫‪E-3‬‬ ‫‪I-4‬‬ ‫‪N-4‬‬ ‫‪NF-4‬‬ ‫‪V-4‬‬ ‫‪VF-4‬‬ ‫‪E-4‬‬ ‫‪I-5‬‬ ‫‪N-5‬‬ ‫‪NF-5‬‬ ‫‪V-5‬‬ ‫‪VF-5‬‬ ‫‪E-5‬‬ ‫‪I-6‬‬ ‫‪N-6‬‬ ‫‪NF-6‬‬ ‫‪V-6‬‬ ‫‪VF-6‬‬ ‫‪E-6‬‬ ‫‪I-7‬‬ ‫‪N-7‬‬ ‫‪NF-7‬‬ ‫‪V-7‬‬ ‫‪VF-7‬‬ ‫‪E-7‬‬ ‫‪I-8‬‬ ‫‪N-8‬‬ ‫‪NF-8‬‬ ‫‪V-8‬‬ ‫‪VF-8‬‬ ‫‪E-8‬‬ ‫‪     ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻵﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ENDING‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ(‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ(‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪D rm : Rh‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Err Mem Full‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-68‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-45‬‬ ‫‪10:23:38‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.6‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪D rm : Rh‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ*‬ ‫‪Tone‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺸﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ )ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‪-‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ(‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺸﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ(‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪583 - 001‬‬ ‫‪Vol.‬‬ ‫‪127 - 000‬‬ ‫‪Pan‬‬ ‫‪+63 - 0 - –64‬‬ ‫‪Rvb‬‬ ‫‪127 - 000‬‬ ‫‪Cho.‬‬ ‫‪127 - 000‬‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٦‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫* ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪) 6‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪(3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪Part‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺁﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻦ ‪ I-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (8‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻜﻮﺍ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ 003‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،I-1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ 003 ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ I-2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .I-8‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪ 004‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪ ،I-2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ I-1 ،‬ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .004‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ )ﻣﻦ ‪ AR-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ (AR-8‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻜﻮﺍ ﺇﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-46‬‬ ‫‪10:23:39‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١-١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢-١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪n t hPo‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪[4‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫]‪ [+‬ﻭ]–[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﺜﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “DELETE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪DELETE‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Us e‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫■ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫? ‪Su r e‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(YES) [+‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]–[ )‪ (NO‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ (EXIT) [7‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪.(YES) [+‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-62‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-47‬‬ ‫‪10:23:39‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bo‬‬ ‫‪bsbt‬‬ ‫‪bs‬‬ ‫‪btck‬‬ ‫‪ckcl‬‬ ‫‪clcm‬‬ ‫‪cmcn‬‬ ‫‪cn‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫■ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪.1‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.1-1‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.1-2‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.1-3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-3‬‬ ‫‪001‬‬ ‫‪062‬‬ ‫‪001‬‬ ‫‪118‬‬ ‫‪005‬‬ ‫‪089‬‬ ‫‪080‬‬ ‫‪140‬‬ ‫‪089‬‬ ‫■ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫‪cl‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻚ ‪1‬‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫·‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪2-4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪8-4‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ck‬‬ ‫‪bt‬‬ ‫‪bs‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪2-3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪8-3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪2-2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪8-2‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪2-1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪8-1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻚ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻚ ‪8‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.8‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻨﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ(‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪) VIRTUAL HALL‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫‪AR-48‬‬ ‫‪10:23:40‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻚ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻚ ‪٤‬‬ ‫‪Re c a l l‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪6-1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ )ﻳﺤﺬﻑ(‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-18‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-62‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S t o r e‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪4-1‬‬ ‫‪AR-49‬‬ ‫‪10:23:40‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bpbo‬‬ ‫‪bp‬‬ ‫‪bobn‬‬ ‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪cs‬‬ ‫‪bsbt‬‬ ‫‪bs‬‬ ‫‪btck‬‬ ‫‪ckcl‬‬ ‫‪clcm‬‬ ‫‪cmcn‬‬ ‫‪cn‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫‪bk bl‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﺖ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-50‬‬ ‫‪10:23:41‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍﺀ )ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺦ‪ ،(.‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫■ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.6‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ‪ 12,000‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،VIRTUAL HALL ،‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ،INTRO‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ‪،SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ‪ ،NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‬ ‫‪.VARIATION/FILL-IN‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Tr.Del‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[+‬‬ ‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]–[ )‪ (NO‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ )ﻳﺤﺬﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-51‬‬ ‫‪10:23:42‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-50‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ( ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪ (TONE‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Tr.Del‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[+‬‬ ‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]–[ )‪ (NO‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-52‬‬ ‫‪10:23:42‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ )ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (5‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪No .‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫‪P l a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪،VIRTUAL HALL ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ )ﻳﺤﺬﻑ( ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Song Del‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ (YES) [+‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]–[ )‪ (NO‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪AR-53‬‬ ‫‪10:23:43‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-62‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫”?‪ “Song Del‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ (YES) [+‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪AR-54‬‬ ‫‪10:23:43‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bqbp‬‬ ‫‪bq‬‬ ‫‪bpbobn‬‬ ‫‪cq‬‬ ‫‪ct‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 17‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺘﻤ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (FUNCTION) ‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬ ‫]‪) [4‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “SCALE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫‪Equal Temperament‬‬ ‫‪Equal‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪Pure Major‬‬ ‫‪PureMajr‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪Pure Minor‬‬ ‫‪PureMinr‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪Pythagorean‬‬ ‫‪Pythagor‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪Kirnberger 3‬‬ ‫‪Kirnbrg3‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪Werckmeister‬‬ ‫‪Wercmeis‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪Mean-Tone‬‬ ‫‪MeanTone‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪Rast‬‬ ‫‪Rast‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪Bayati‬‬ ‫‪Bayati‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫‪Hijaz‬‬ ‫‪Hijaz‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪Saba‬‬ ‫‪Saba‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪Dashti‬‬ ‫‪Dashti‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪Chahargah‬‬ ‫‪Chaharga‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪Segah‬‬ ‫‪Segah‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪Gurjari Todi‬‬ ‫‪GujrTodi‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪Chandrakauns‬‬ ‫‪Cndrkuns‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪Charukeshi‬‬ ‫‪Carukesi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪SCALE‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪Eq u a l‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺭﻱ )‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(B‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪AR-55‬‬ ‫‪10:23:44‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “OTHER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ« ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻝ ‪ 305‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪OTHER‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫‪I L o v eHe r‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫”‪.“AcompScl‬‬ ‫‪Sc l‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪A c om‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺬﻫﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-42‬‬ ‫)‪،(TONE‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪ ،(RHYTHM‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)‪ (SONG BACK‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-56‬‬ ‫‪10:23:44‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 90‬ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪S t . G r Pn o‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-43‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪Du e t‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﻏﻠﻰ ‪ 012‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-43‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ ...1‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ...2‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ...4‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪1U‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “OTHER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪H l d‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪A r‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.ON‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪013-030‬‬ ‫‪Up‬‬ ‫‪031-048‬‬ ‫‪Down‬‬ ‫‪049-066‬‬ ‫‪U/D A‬‬ ‫‪067-084‬‬ ‫‪U/D B‬‬ ‫‪085-102‬‬ ‫‪Random‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫‪AR-57‬‬ ‫‪10:23:45‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻛﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 153‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.162‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “DELETE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪DELETE‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-26‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-59‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻻﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “DELETE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪DELETE‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪USERSONG‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫? ‪Su r e‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(YES) [+‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]–[ )‪ (NO‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ (EXIT) [7‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪[+‬‬ ‫)‪.(YES‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫”‪.“All Data‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Da t a‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪A l l‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫? ‪Su r e‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(YES) [+‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]–[ )‪ (NO‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ (EXIT) [7‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪[+‬‬ ‫)‪.(YES‬‬ ‫‪AR-58‬‬ ‫‪10:23:46‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪bl‬‬ ‫‪ct‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ .MIDI‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺰﻋﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ SP2) Windows® XP‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ( *‬ ‫*‪٢‬‬ ‫®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫*‪٣‬‬ ‫‪Windows® 7‬‬ ‫*‪٤‬‬ ‫‪Windows® 8‬‬ ‫*‪٥‬‬ ‫‪Windows® 8.1‬‬ ‫‪،10.8.X ،10.7.X ،10.6.X ،10.5.X ،10.4.11 ،10.3.9) Mac OS® X‬‬ ‫‪(10.9.X‬‬ ‫*‪ Windows XP :١‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ Windows XP‬ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ -32‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬ ‫*‪ -32) Windows Vista :٢‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬ ‫*‪ -32) Windows 7 :٣‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ -64 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬ ‫*‪ -32) Windows 8 :٤‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ -64 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬ ‫*‪ -32) Windows 8.1 :٥‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ -64 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻥ!‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A-B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-59‬‬ ‫‪10:23:47‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.MIDI‬‬ ‫‪ : CASIO USB-MIDI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺏ ‪،Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫‪Mac OS X ،Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺹ ‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،MIDI‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪.(GM) 1‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪MIDI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺟﺰﺀ(‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 16‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(16‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺗﻴﻦ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫‪ 05‬ﻭ‪ (06‬ﻛﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺣﺜﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ )‪ ،(L‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ )‪ .(R‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ )‪ (R‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ )‪(L‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “MIDI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫”‪.“Navi. Ch‬‬ ‫‪Ch‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪Na v i .‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ )‪.(R‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﺣﺜﺔ )‪.(L‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.16‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “MIDI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪M I D I‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪Ch‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫‪b d‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪Ke‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪AR-60‬‬ ‫‪10:23:48‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (٤‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻰ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ )ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ ،((٣‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪.(R‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﺪ ﻻﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪“MIDI‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫”‪.“Local‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻭ‪R‬‬ ‫)‪ (٤‬ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪LR‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪(L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪(R‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫✕‬ ‫✕‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫✕‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫✕‬ ‫✕‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫✕‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪L o c a l‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( ) [4‬ﻭ]‪ ( ) [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪) “MIDI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-7‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪-10) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪) [4‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪.(ENTER) [9‬‬ ‫( ﻭ]‪) [6‬‬ ‫”‪.“AcompOut‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪A c ompOu t‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪AR-61‬‬ ‫‪10:23:48‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ (SMF) MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ CASIO WORLDWIDE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹸﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-20‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-45‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-50‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-48‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪TW7‬‬ ‫‪*DW7‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪AC7‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫)ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪CM2‬‬ ‫‪*MID‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪SP7‬‬ ‫‪*SL7‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪RM7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬ ‫‪AL7‬‬ ‫*‪ :١‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻮﻋﺔ ﻃﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫*‪ :٢‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪(1 ،0‬‬ ‫*‪ :٣‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ (http://music.casio.com/) CASIO MUSIC SITE‬ﻭﺣﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-62‬‬ ‫‪10:23:49‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺛﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ (AUDIO IN‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ )‪ (PHONES/OUTPUT‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪AR-63‬‬ ‫‪10:23:50‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺃﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.( ) (POWER) P‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻭﺛﻢ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺄ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺋﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻟﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-33‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 601‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 608‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ 171‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،180‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-39‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-42‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 181‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 190‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-45‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-39‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-30‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 153‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 162‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-30‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-42‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-30‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫‪AR-64‬‬ ‫‪10:23:51‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﻟﻤﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 24) 48‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻵﺕ ﺍﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-18‬ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-18‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) VIRTUAL HALL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-16‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-16‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-48‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-59‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪AR-65‬‬ ‫‪10:23:52‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪CTK-4400/WK-240/WK-245‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ 61 :CTK-4400‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ 76 :WK-240/WK-245‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪ 48‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )‪ 24‬ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫‪600‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) 8‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،5 :‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪*(3 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ‬ ‫‪VIRTUAL HALL‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،10‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪255‬‬ ‫‪152‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪*10‬‬ ‫‪) 4‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪LR ،R ،L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) 10‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ(*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 4) 32‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ × ‪ 8‬ﺑﻨﻮﻙ(‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ 6 ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪(LR ،R ،L‬‬ ‫‪ 12,000‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪MIDI‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ±1‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +12‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ‪ ±2‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ =A4‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 415.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 465.9‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ ‪ 440.0 :‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪305‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ 90‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺮﺱ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ GM Level 1 ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-66‬‬ ‫‪10:23:53‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ /‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪(WK-240/WK-245‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻴﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 140 :‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 4.5 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ (RMS‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 9 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 200 :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﻗﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 3 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 10 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ 6 :CTK-4400‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ‪ -‬ﺯﻧﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ 6 :WK-240/WK-245‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ‪ -‬ﺯﻧﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ 3 :CTK-4400‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ 5 :WK-240/WK-245‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺑﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪AD-E95100L‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲﺀ ‪ AC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4,000‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ (AC‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ = ‪ 7.7‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ 4.3 :CTK-4400‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ 6.9 :WK-240/WK-245‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ × ‪) 2‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 2.5 :‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪ 2.5 +‬ﻭﺍﻁ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ 10.3 × 35.0 × 94.8 :CTK-4400‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ‪ 13.4 × 38.5 × 116.1 :WK-240/WK-245‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ = ‪ 1,024‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‬ ‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،TV‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ »ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ« ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﺥ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺃﺩﺍﺏ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ﺣﺬﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺗﺨﺎﺫﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-67‬‬ ‫‪10:23:54‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪Err Exist‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-24‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ • ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-26‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Err Limit‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Err Mem Full‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Err No Data‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪Err Protect‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Err SizeOver‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-26‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-22‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-19‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-47‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-58‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-68‬‬ ‫‪10:23:54‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ WORLD 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 TWINKLE TWINKLE LITTLE STAR LIGHTLY ROW LONG LONG AGO ON TOP OF OLD SMOKEY SAKURA SAKURA WHEN THE SAINTS GO MARCHING IN AMAZING GRACE* AULD LANG SYNE COME BIRDS DID YOU EVER SEE A LASSIE? MICHAEL ROW THE BOAT ASHORE DANNY BOY MY BONNIE HOME SWEET HOME AURA LEE HOME ON THE RANGE ALOHA OE SANTA LUCIA FURUSATO GREENSLEEVES* JOSHUA FOUGHT THE BATTLE OF JERICHO THE MUFFIN MAN LONDON BRIDGE UNDER THE SPREADING CHESTNUT TREE SIPPIN’ CIDER THROUGH A STRAW GRANDFATHER’S CLOCK ANNIE LAURIE BEAUTIFUL DREAMER IF YOU’RE HAPPY AND YOU KNOW IT, CLAP YOUR HANDS MY DARLING CLEMENTINE LITTLE BROWN JUG HOUSE OF THE RISING SUN SHE WORE A YELLOW RIBBON YANKEE DOODLE MY OLD KENTUCKY HOME SZLA DZIEWECZKA TROIKA WALTZING MATILDA ON THE BRIDGE OF AVIGNON I’VE BEEN WORKING ON THE RAILROAD OH! SUSANNA CAMPTOWN RACES JEANNIE WITH THE LIGHT BROWN HAIR TURKEY IN THE STRAW JAMAICA FAREWELL EVENT 046 047 048 049 050 SILENT NIGHT WE WISH YOU A MERRY CHRISTMAS JINGLE BELLS JOY TO THE WORLD O CHRISTMAS TREE PIANO/CLASSICS 051 052 053 054 MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB LE CYGNE FROM “LE CARNAVAL DES ANIMAUX”* JE TE VEUX* SONATA op.13 “PATHÉTIQUE” 2nd Mov.* 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 HEIDENRÖSLEIN AIR FROM “SUITE no.3” SPRING FROM “THE FOUR SEASONS” HABANERA FROM “CARMEN” BRINDISI FROM “LA TRAVIATA” HUNGARIAN DANCES no.5 MINUET IN G MAJOR MUSETTE IN D MAJOR GAVOTTE (GOSSEC) ARABESQUE (BURGMÜLLER) CHOPSTICKS DECK THE HALL ODE TO JOY AVE MARIA (GOUNOD) SONATINA op.36 no.1 1st Mov. PRELUDE op.28 no.7 (CHOPIN) RÊVERIE GYMNOPÉDIES no.1 GOING HOME FROM “FROM THE NEW WORLD” FÜR ELISE TURKISH MARCH (MOZART) SONATA op.27 no.2 “MOONLIGHT” 1st Mov. ETUDE op.10 no.3 “CHANSON DE L’ADIEU” THE ENTERTAINER WEDDING MARCH FROM “MIDSUMMER NIGHT’S DREAM” AMERICAN PATROL FRÖHLICHER LANDMANN LA CHEVALERESQUE SONATA K.545 1st Mov. LA PRIÈRE D’UNE VIERGE VALSE op.64 no.1 “PETIT CHIEN”* LIEBESTRÄUME no.3 JESUS BLEIBET MEINE FREUDE* CANON (PACHELBEL) SERENADE FROM “EINE KLEINE NACHTMUSIK”* MARCH FROM “THE NUTCRACKER”* INVENTIONEN no.1 PRAELUDIUM no.1 (J.S.BACH) SONATINE op.20 no.1 1st Mov. HUMORESKE (DVOŘÁK) DOLLY’S DREAMING AND AWAKENING LA FILLE AUX CHEVEUX DE LIN ARABESQUE no.1 (DEBUSSY) TRÄUMEREI MAPLE LEAF RAG NOCTURNE op.9 no.2 (CHOPIN)* EXERCISE 101 - 150 EXERCISE I / II / III DEMO TUNES 151 - 152 DEMO TUNES* USER SONGS 153 - 162 USER SONGS .‫* ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ AR-69 CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd 71 2014/02/17 10:23:55 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪ Fingered 3‬ﻭ‪Full Range‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪Fingered 1‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪Fingered 2 ،Fingered 1‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Cm‬‬ ‫‪Fm‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‪Dm‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪A add9‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‪Cm‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Gm7‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Fm7‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪F7‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‪Ddim‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪Bm‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Gm Am‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Cdim‬‬ ‫‪Caug *3‬‬ ‫‪Csus4 *3‬‬ ‫‪Csus2 *3‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 3‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Full Range Chord‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،3 ،2 ،Fingered 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ Full Range Chord‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C7‬‬ ‫‪Cm7 *3‬‬ ‫‪CM7‬‬ ‫‪Cm7b5 *3‬‬ ‫‪C7b5 *3‬‬ ‫‪C7sus4‬‬ ‫‪Cadd9‬‬ ‫‪Cmadd9‬‬ ‫‪CmM7‬‬ ‫‪Cdim7 *3‬‬ ‫‪C69 *3‬‬ ‫‪C6 *1 *3‬‬ ‫‪Cm6 *2 *3‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﺎ ‪.Am7‬‬ ‫‪ *2‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﺎ ‪.Am75‬‬ ‫‪ *3‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR-70‬‬ ‫‪10:23:55‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫‪10:23:59‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪(A#)/Bb‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪(G#)/Ab‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫)‪F /(Gb‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪(D#)/Eb‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫)‪C /(Db‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪*1‬‬ ‫‪*2‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪dim‬‬ ‫‪aug‬‬ ‫‪sus4‬‬ ‫‪sus2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪m7‬‬ ‫‪M7‬‬ ‫‪m7b5‬‬ ‫‪7b5‬‬ ‫‪7sus4‬‬ ‫‪add9‬‬ ‫‪madd9‬‬ ‫‪mM7‬‬ ‫‪dim7‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪m6‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪AR-71‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ *1 .‬ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ‪ *2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪10:24:00‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬ ‫‪bq bp bo bn‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﻄﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪br‬‬ ‫‪cs ct‬‬ ‫‪co cp cq cr‬‬ ‫‪bt ck cl cm cn‬‬ ‫‪bs‬‬ ‫‪3 45‬‬ ‫‪bl bm‬‬ ‫‪CTK-4400‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6 7 8 9 bk‬‬ CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd 76 2014/02/17 10:24:00 2 6 7 8 9 bk bl 1 bm 345 WK-240 / WK-245 bs bt ck cl cm cn co cp cq cr bq bp bo bn cs ct br Models: CTK-4400/WK-240/WK-245 Transmitted 1 - 16 1 - 16 Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart 1 1 - 16 Function Default Changed 0 - 127 0 - 127 *1 Basic Channel 12 - 120 O 9nH v = 1 - 127 X 9nH v = 0, 8nH v =** Mode 3 X O 9nH v = 1 - 127 X 9nH v = 0 X O Mode 3 X X X O (MSB only) O O *2 O O O O O O X X O O X O *3 X Default Messages Altered 0, 32 1 6, 38 7 10 11 64 Mode Note ON Note OFF True voice Velocity Key’s Ch’s Note Number After Touch Pitch Bender Control Change Version : 1.0 ‫ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ‬: ** Remarks Bank select Modulation Data entry Volume Pan Expression Hold 1 10:24:00 2014/02/17 78 CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd X X X O *2 O 0 - 127 O *3 O *3 X O X X X X X X O *2 O 0 - 127 O O O O O *2 66 67 91 93 100, 101 : Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune O O :True # System Common : Clock : Commands Program Change System Real Time O O X O O X System Exclusive Aux Messages X O X O X X Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Sostenuto Soft pedal Reverb send Chorus send RPN LSB, MSB O : Yes X : No .‫ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬:*1 ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬MIDI ‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬،‫ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬،RPN ،NRPN ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬:*2 . http://world.casio.com/ .‫ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬:*3 : All sound off : Reset all controller : Local ON/OFF : All notes OFF : Active Sense : Reset Remarks Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 10:23:17 2014/02/17 2 CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CTK-4400‬‬ ‫‪WK-240‬‬ ‫‪WK-245‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫»ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ«‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1402-A Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪WK240/CTK4400-AR1A‬‬ ‫‪10:23:17‬‬ ‫‪2014/02/17‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪CTK4400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬

Casio WK-240 WK-245 CTK-4400 Manual

Related manuals

Casio

LK-260

Casio

CTK-2400

Casio

LK-220

Casio

CTK-3400

Casio

LK-165

Casio

CTK-4200

Casio

LK-230

Casio

LK-280

Casio

CTK-2000

Casio

LK-270

Casio

WK-210

Casio

CTK-5000